<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Andrii</id>
		<title>TQAuditor Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Andrii"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Special:Contributions/Andrii"/>
		<updated>2026-06-01T20:18:33Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.27.1</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4343</id>
		<title>Mistakes discussion: in general</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4343"/>
				<updated>2022-08-09T12:47:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the evaluator finishes the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report|evaluation]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''', the translator gets an email notification. Also, the translator will get a notification of comparison report creation if the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Notifications|corresponding setting]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Translator's review'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of comparison report creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation report is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click '''&amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;'''. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click '''&amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot;''' in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation settings|'''evaluation settings''']]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator requests reevaluation, the evaluator will review the translator's comments. If they agree with the translator, they will decrease mistake severity. If not, the evaluator will reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the evaluator clicks '''&amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;''', and the translator will be able to review the reevaluated translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Arbitration'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not reach agreement with the evaluator, the translator can request arbitration (a '''&amp;quot;Request arbitration&amp;quot;''' button will appear once all the evaluation attempts are used). A user who is assigned as the arbiter will get an email notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with any role except &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; can be assigned to the project as the arbiter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the translator can request arbitration if the arbiter is assigned to the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter provides a final decision on whether to decrease mistake severity or not. If the arbiter decides not to decrease it, they have to reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete evaluation, the arbiter has either to decrease mistake severities or reply to all the translator's comments. Otherwise, they will receive the following message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter error1.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Then the arbiter clicks '''&amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;''' and provides a final score that cannot be disputed. The project is completed and all participants will receive email notifications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete project.png|border|210px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4342</id>
		<title>Mistakes discussion: in general</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4342"/>
				<updated>2022-08-09T12:39:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the evaluator finishes the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report|evaluation]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''', the translator gets an email notification. Also, the translator will get a notification of comparison report creation if the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Notifications|corresponding setting]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Translator's review'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of comparison report creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation report is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation settings|'''evaluation settings''']]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator requests reevaluation, the evaluator will review the translator's comments. If they agree with the translator, they will decrease mistake severity. If not, the evaluator will reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the evaluator clicks &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, and the translator will be able to review the reevaluated translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Arbitration'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not reach agreement with the evaluator, the translator can request arbitration (a &amp;quot;Request arbitration&amp;quot; button will appear once all the evaluation attempts are used). A user who is assigned as the arbiter will get an email notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with any role except &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; can be assigned to the project as the arbiter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the translator can request arbitration if the arbiter is assigned to the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter provides a final decision on whether to decrease mistake severity or not. If the arbiter decides not to decrease it, they have to reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete evaluation, the arbiter has either to decrease mistake severities or reply to all the translator's comments. Otherwise, they will receive the following message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter error1.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Then the arbiter clicks &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot; and provides a final score that cannot be disputed. The project is completed and all participants will receive email notifications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete project.png|border|210px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4341</id>
		<title>Mistakes discussion: in general</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4341"/>
				<updated>2022-08-09T12:36:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the evaluator finishes the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report|evaluation]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''', the translator gets an email notification. Also, the translator will get a notification of comparison report creation if the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Notifications|corresponding setting]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Translator's review'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of comparison report creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation report is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator requests reevaluation, the evaluator will review the translator's comments. If they agree with the translator, they will decrease mistake severity. If not, the evaluator will reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the evaluator clicks &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, and the translator will be able to review the reevaluated translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Arbitration'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not reach agreement with the evaluator, the translator can request arbitration (a &amp;quot;Request arbitration&amp;quot; button will appear once all the evaluation attempts are used). A user who is assigned as the arbiter will get an email notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with any role except &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; can be assigned to the project as the arbiter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the translator can request arbitration if the arbiter is assigned to the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter provides a final decision on whether to decrease mistake severity or not. If the arbiter decides not to decrease it, they have to reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete evaluation, the arbiter has either to decrease mistake severities or reply to all the translator's comments. Otherwise, they will receive the following message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter error1.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Then the arbiter clicks &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot; and provides a final score that cannot be disputed. The project is completed and all participants will receive email notifications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete project.png|border|210px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4340</id>
		<title>Mistakes discussion: in general</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion:_in_general&amp;diff=4340"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T14:22:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Arbitration */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When the evaluator finishes the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#View in comparison — this link redirects you on the page with Comparison report|evaluation]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''', the translator gets an email notification. Also, the translator will get a notification of comparison report creation if the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Notifications|corresponding setting]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Translator's review'''==&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of comparison report creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation report is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator requests reevaluation, the evaluator will review the translator's comments. If they agree with the translator, they will decrease mistake severity. If not, the evaluator will reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then the evaluator clicks &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, and the translator will be able to review the reevaluated translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Arbitration'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not reach agreement with the evaluator, the translator can request arbitration (a &amp;quot;Request arbitration&amp;quot; button will appear once all the evaluation attempts are used). A user who is assigned as the arbiter will get an email notification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with any role except &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; can be assigned to the project as the arbiter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the translator can request arbitration if the arbiter is assigned to the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter provides a final decision on whether to decrease mistake severity or not. If the arbiter decides not to decrease it, they have to reply to the translator's comment to clarify the matter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete evaluation, the arbiter has either to decrease mistake severities or reply to all the translator's comments. Otherwise, they will receive the following message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter error1.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitors comments.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Then the arbiter clicks &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot; and provides a final score that cannot be disputed. The project is completed and all participants will receive email notifications. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete project.png|border|210px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion_for_arbiter&amp;diff=4339</id>
		<title>Mistakes discussion for arbiter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Mistakes_discussion_for_arbiter&amp;diff=4339"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T14:00:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When you receive an email notification of the arbitration request, follow the project ID link in the email and do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Open the &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can select the &amp;quot;With mistakes&amp;quot; option in the &amp;quot;Units display&amp;quot; settings so that only units with mistakes are displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you agree with the translator, decrease the severity of a mistake and add a comment if needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*If you disagree with the translator, reply to their comment and provide an explanation regarding the mistake severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit mistake.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button to leave a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter's final comment enterring corr.jpg|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*You can also edit or delete the comment or add a new mistake:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter's final comment short.jpg|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*When you replied to all translator’s comments, select &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete pr.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Write the evaluation summary and click &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakes discussion for arbiter1.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To complete evaluation, the arbiter has either to decrease mistake severities or reply to all the translator's comments. Otherwise, they will receive the following message:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbiter error1.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have provided a final score that cannot be disputed. The project is completed and all participants will receive email notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Mistakes discussion]] Back to the table of contents.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4338</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4338"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:18:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4337</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4337"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:18:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Mistake types */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4336</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4336"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:17:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Specializations */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4335</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4335"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:17:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Languages */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4334</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4334"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:16:41Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Clients */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4333</id>
		<title>Evaluator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4333"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:15:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reevaluation request */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Introduction'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How to accept invitation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The following window appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Your account will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Profile settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;My Profile&amp;quot; page, you can update your personal information and change your password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to the &amp;quot;My profile&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quick compare'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the &amp;quot;Quick compare&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Supported bilingual file types&amp;quot; to see the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Upload selected files&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;Projects&amp;quot; page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project's ID to open a project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, you may find additional filters here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Upload files'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you have to upload files. Press the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Choose files&amp;quot; button to select two versions of a translated file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Create comparison report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the &amp;quot;Create comparison report&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report &amp;quot;Comparison report&amp;quot;] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Start evaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (automatic word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also adjust evaluation settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip locked units —  the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip segments with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation sample word count limit — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button once settings are adjusted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (manual word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Please take into account that the &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the &amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot; button within a needed segment to add a mistake:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify each mistake's type and severity, leave a comment if needed, and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add mistakes by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you may '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' with mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Reevaluation request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the &amp;quot;Project details&amp;quot; page. Next, press the &amp;quot;Evaluation report&amp;quot; button and start the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; button to reply to the translator's comment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; in order to do the reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select a &amp;quot;Last commented by translator&amp;quot; option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Arbitration request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your translator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Translator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your evaluator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Evaluator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quality standard'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Quality standard&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Score limit and mistake severities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quality levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4332</id>
		<title>Evaluator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4332"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:15:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Evaluation with manual word count */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Introduction'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How to accept invitation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The following window appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Your account will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Profile settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;My Profile&amp;quot; page, you can update your personal information and change your password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to the &amp;quot;My profile&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quick compare'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the &amp;quot;Quick compare&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Supported bilingual file types&amp;quot; to see the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Upload selected files&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;Projects&amp;quot; page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project's ID to open a project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, you may find additional filters here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Upload files'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you have to upload files. Press the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Choose files&amp;quot; button to select two versions of a translated file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Create comparison report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the &amp;quot;Create comparison report&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report &amp;quot;Comparison report&amp;quot;] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Start evaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (automatic word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also adjust evaluation settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip locked units —  the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip segments with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation sample word count limit — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button once settings are adjusted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (manual word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Please take into account that the &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the &amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot; button within a needed segment to add a mistake:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify each mistake's type and severity, leave a comment if needed, and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add mistakes by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you may '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' with mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Reevaluation request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the &amp;quot;Project details&amp;quot; page. Next, press the &amp;quot;Evaluation report&amp;quot; button and start the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; button to reply to the translator's comment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; in order to do the reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select a &amp;quot;Last commented by translator&amp;quot; option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Arbitration request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your translator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Translator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your evaluator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Evaluator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quality standard'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Quality standard&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Score limit and mistake severities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quality levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4331</id>
		<title>Evaluator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluator_user_manual&amp;diff=4331"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:14:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Upload files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Introduction'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with an edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by a mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator's role is to assess the quality of a translation. To do it, they compare two versions of a translated file, add mistakes and classify them by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
Once the evaluation is completed, the evaluator generates a report regarding the quality of the translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How to accept invitation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The following window appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator registration2.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue), and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Your account will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Get started with an evaluator account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several main menus the evaluator has access to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluator profile1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quick compare''' — here, you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Projects''' — here, you can find the list of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reports''' — here, you can find your reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''System''' — here, you can find the quality standard of the company you cooperate with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Profile settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;My Profile&amp;quot; page, you can update your personal information and change your password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to the &amp;quot;My profile&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Profile settings1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quick compare'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system. Press the &amp;quot;Quick compare&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick compare1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Supported bilingual file types&amp;quot; to see the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Upload selected files&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report comparison report] will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color and different filters to simplify your work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the &amp;quot;Projects&amp;quot; page, you can find the list of projects that you have been assigned as the evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project's ID to open a project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects list1.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column highlighted in blue, and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 project filters.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, you may find additional filters here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Is overdue — the system will display the overdue projects only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Stage — tick one of the checkboxes, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project code — the system will display projects with the specified project code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translation job code — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID entered by the manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Review job code — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Project name — the system will display the projects with the specified name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Specialization — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Service — the system will display the projects with a particular service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation count — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Manager — the system will display the projects assigned to a particular manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Creation date — the system will display the projects created within the specified dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you've been assigned the project, you can see general information, a project manager, and their email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details1.2.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details2.1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Upload files'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you have to upload files. Press the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; button to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files1.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Choose files&amp;quot; button to select two versions of a translated file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files3.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; the evaluator is the only user who can upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Create comparison report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have uploaded files, you can create the comparison report. Press the &amp;quot;Create comparison report&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Upload files2.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the comparison report is generated, you will see time limits details, the comparison of the original and reviewed translation, markup display settings, and comparison details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparison report1.1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, please check the [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Comparison_report &amp;quot;Comparison report&amp;quot;] page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Start evaluation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once files are uploaded and the comparison report is created, you can start an evaluation by selecting whether an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The automatic word count is used for fully reviewed files, and the manual word count is used for partially reviewed files. You can read more on the differences between the two types of word count and how to use them on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with automatic word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the automatic word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (automatic word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also adjust evaluation settings:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip repetitions — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Skip locked units —  the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip segments with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation sample word count limit — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button once settings are adjusted:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count2.2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation with manual word count'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To start the evaluation with the manual word count, press &amp;quot;Start evaluation (manual word count)&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation1.1.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words and press the &amp;quot;Start evaluation&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation manual word count1+.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Please take into account that the &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of the file. You can read more on how to use the manual word count on [https://wiki.tqauditor.com/wiki/Frequently_Asked_Questions#Automatic_vs._manual_word_count this page].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have started the evaluation, you can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation automatic word count3.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now you have to start adding mistakes. Click the &amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot; button within a needed segment to add a mistake:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specify each mistake's type and severity, leave a comment if needed, and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can edit, delete mistake/comment or add mistakes by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The system will send the quality assessment report to the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that you may '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#Export to Excel|export the evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' with mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Reevaluation request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator has requested a reevaluation, you will receive a corresponding email notification:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation1.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the project ID, and it will bring you to the &amp;quot;Project details&amp;quot; page. Next, press the &amp;quot;Evaluation report&amp;quot; button and start the reevaluation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation2.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; button to reply to the translator's comment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; in order to do the reevaluation you have to reply to all the comments left by the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also select a &amp;quot;Last commented by translator&amp;quot; option so that you see units with the translator's comments first:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reevaluation4.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once done, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, edit an evaluation summary if needed, and press the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Arbitration request'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If there is still no agreement regarding the severity of mistakes, the translator can request arbitration. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed. The stage of the project will change accordingly:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration1+.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You'll also receive an email notification when the arbiter completes the project. Follow the project ID link to see the changes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arbitration2.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the evaluator can also be assigned to a project as the translator, you can check both the translator and evaluator reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your translator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Translator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ev4.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pp.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluator reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your evaluator reports, go to &amp;quot;Reports&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Evaluator report&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports2.png|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports3.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports4.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports5.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports6.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports7.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports8.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Уou can specify the project creation date range using the filter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quality standard'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to &amp;quot;Settings&amp;quot; —&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Quality standard&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Score limit and mistake severities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quality levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4330</id>
		<title>Frequently Asked Questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4330"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:13:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* How can I reset my password or remember my username? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__FORCETOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''License'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the '''[[License]]''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How can I reset my password or remember my username?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. First and foremost, you need to log out of any accounts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go to '''https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/request-password-reset''', enter your email and press '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshcot 1.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or from the [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/login|'''Log in'''] page press '''request password reset''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 3.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will send you the password reset links to all your accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check your email for further instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have several accounts, click on the corresponding link (or copy it to a web browser) to reset the password for the account you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 4.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. It will open the '''Reset password''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your new password and press '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 5.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. You'll be logged into your account automatically and redirected to the '''My profile''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it also happened that you forgot your username, you can find it on this page as well:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 6.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Be careful to use the right username to enter into the correct account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Automatic vs. manual word count'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Automatic:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for fully reviewed files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display only the segments with the total word count specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if 1000 was specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;, the system will display around 100 segments with around 1000 words in total (of course, it may vary depending on the size of segments).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If the evaluator specifies 1000 as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; while there are only 500 words in all corrected segments (let's say, there are 900 words in the file), the system will still display corrected segments with around 500 words in total. It means that 1000 can be safely used as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; even if the real total word count is lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if the evaluation report includes corrected segments with around 1000 words and the total source words is 2130, 2130 will be used in the formula. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Manual:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for partially reviewed files (in order not to split the file into parts and import only the reviewed part).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', a reviewer reviewed only 1500 words in a 5000-word file. Then they should specify 1500 as &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; and the system will not take the remaining 3500 words into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display all the corrected segments. So, if the file is large, the evaluator will have to evaluate way more segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. In this case, &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Where I can find ChangeTracker?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ChangeTracker was a program from which the TQAuditor development has begun. We launched it in 2011, and since then got over 12 000 downloads. We completely stopped its further development and moved to TQAuditor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend starting using new online TQAuditor system, because it is easier and supports more file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't want to register on TQAuditor, you can use the '''&amp;quot;Quick comparison&amp;quot;''' function:  https://cloud.tqauditor.com/quick/upload&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More info here: https://tqauditor.com/changetracker.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Frequently Asked Questions]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4329</id>
		<title>Frequently Asked Questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4329"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:12:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* How can I reset my password or remember my username? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__FORCETOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''License'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the '''[[License]]''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How can I reset my password or remember my username?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. First and foremost, you need to log out of any accounts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go to '''https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/request-password-reset''', enter your email and press '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshcot 1.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or from the [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/login|'''Log in'''] page press '''request password reset''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 3.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will send you the password reset links to all your accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check your email for further instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have several accounts, click on the corresponding link (or copy it to a web browser) to reset the password for the account you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 4.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. It will open the '''Reset password''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your new password and press '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 5.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. You'll be logged into your account automatically and redirected to the '''My profile''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it also happened that you forgot your username, you can find it on this page as well:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 6.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Be careful to use the right username to enter into the correct account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Automatic vs. manual word count'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Automatic:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for fully reviewed files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display only the segments with the total word count specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if 1000 was specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;, the system will display around 100 segments with around 1000 words in total (of course, it may vary depending on the size of segments).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If the evaluator specifies 1000 as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; while there are only 500 words in all corrected segments (let's say, there are 900 words in the file), the system will still display corrected segments with around 500 words in total. It means that 1000 can be safely used as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; even if the real total word count is lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if the evaluation report includes corrected segments with around 1000 words and the total source words is 2130, 2130 will be used in the formula. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Manual:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for partially reviewed files (in order not to split the file into parts and import only the reviewed part).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', a reviewer reviewed only 1500 words in a 5000-word file. Then they should specify 1500 as &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; and the system will not take the remaining 3500 words into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display all the corrected segments. So, if the file is large, the evaluator will have to evaluate way more segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. In this case, &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Where I can find ChangeTracker?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ChangeTracker was a program from which the TQAuditor development has begun. We launched it in 2011, and since then got over 12 000 downloads. We completely stopped its further development and moved to TQAuditor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend starting using new online TQAuditor system, because it is easier and supports more file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't want to register on TQAuditor, you can use the '''&amp;quot;Quick comparison&amp;quot;''' function:  https://cloud.tqauditor.com/quick/upload&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More info here: https://tqauditor.com/changetracker.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Frequently Asked Questions]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4328</id>
		<title>Frequently Asked Questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Frequently_Asked_Questions&amp;diff=4328"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:12:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* How can I reset my password or remember my username? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;__FORCETOC__&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''License'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please check the '''[[License]]''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How can I reset my password or remember my username?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. First and foremost, you need to log out of any accounts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go to '''https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/request-password-reset''', enter your email and press '''&amp;quot;Send&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshcot 1.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or from the [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/site/login|'''Log in'''] page press '''request password reset''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 3.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will send you the password reset links to all your accounts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Check your email for further instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have several accounts, click on the corresponding link (or copy it to a web browser) to reset the password for the account you need:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 4.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. It will open the '''Reset password''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter your new password and press '''&amp;quot;Save&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 5.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. You'll be logged into your account automatically and redirected to the '''My profile''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it also happened that you forgot your username, you can find it on this page as well:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 6.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Be careful to use the right username to enter into the correct account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Automatic vs. manual word count'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Automatic:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for fully reviewed files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display only the segments with the total word count specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if 1000 was specified as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot;, the system will display around 100 segments with around 1000 words in total (of course, it may vary depending on the size of segments).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If the evaluator specifies 1000 as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; while there are only 500 words in all corrected segments (let's say, there are 900 words in the file), the system will still display corrected segments with around 500 words in total. It means that 1000 can be safely used as &amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; even if the real total word count is lower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', if the evaluation report includes corrected segments with around 1000 words and the total source words is 2130, 2130 will be used in the formula. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Manual:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Used for partially reviewed files (in order not to split the file into parts and import only the reviewed part).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. The &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; should reflect the total number of words in the reviewed part of file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''For example'', a reviewer reviewed only 1500 words in a 5000-word file. Then they should specify 1500 as &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; and the system will not take the remaining 3500 words into account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The system will display all the corrected segments. So, if the file is large, the evaluator will have to evaluate way more segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. When calculating the score, the &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot; is used. In this case, &amp;quot;Evaluated source words&amp;quot; = &amp;quot;Total source words&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Where I can find ChangeTracker?'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ChangeTracker was a program from which the TQAuditor development has begun. We launched it in 2011, and since then got over 12 000 downloads. We completely stopped its further development and moved to TQAuditor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We recommend starting using new online TQAuditor system, because it is easier and supports more file formats.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't want to register on TQAuditor, you can use the '''&amp;quot;Quick comparison&amp;quot;''' function:  https://cloud.tqauditor.com/quick/upload&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More info here: https://tqauditor.com/changetracker.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Frequently Asked Questions]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Translator_user_manual&amp;diff=4327</id>
		<title>Translator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Translator_user_manual&amp;diff=4327"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:10:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Project filters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Introduction'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How to accept invitation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rr1.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The following window appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:42.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your own username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue) and press'''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Your account will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''My profile settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''My Profile''' page you can update your personal information and change password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to the '''My profile''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Translator my profile menu1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Get started with a translator account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several main menus that you need to focus on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Translator main menus1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quick comparison''' — here you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Projects''' — here you can find the list of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reports''' — here you can find your reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''System''' — here you can find the Quality standard of the company you cooperate with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quick comparison'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Supported bilingual file types''' to see the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Upload selected files&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quick comparison#Comparison report|comparison report]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color, and different filters to simplify your work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More details '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quick comparison|here]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Projects menu, you can find the list of projects where you have been assigned as a translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Project ID''' to open a project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projesdfct ID.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the project was created you can see the time limit details, general information on the project, project manager and their email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:111.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::[[File:222.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the comparison and evaluation reports are generated by an evaluator, you will see:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Comparison details and change percentage details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5a.png|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation details and Mistake counts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6a.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7a.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the evaluator uploaded files, they can start the evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluations report.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Comparison report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you can see the comparison of the original and amended translation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparisonse report.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, please check the &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Comparison report]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project files'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the evaluator uploaded files, you can find them here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pr iles.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation and arbitration requests'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you receive the email with translation quality evaluation, follow the project ID link in your email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And do the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. View the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparisonf report.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go to the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation report.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Look through classification of each mistake. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. If you agree with classification of all the mistakes, press &amp;quot;'''Complete project'''&amp;quot;: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage. If you do not agree with classification of some mistakes, do the following actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Press &amp;quot;'''Add Comment'''&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake that you do not agree with and enter it by clicking &amp;quot;'''Submit'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png| border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
6. When you have entered all the comments, send the project for reevaluation by pressing &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review your comments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they are convincing, the evaluator will change the mistake severity in your favor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive the reevaluated project. You are able to send this project for reevaluation one more time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. If you have not reached agreement with the evaluator, you can send the project to the arbiter by pressing &amp;quot;'''Request arbitration'''&amp;quot; (it appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your translator reports, go to '''Reports ⇾ Translator report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New.png|border|410px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ev4.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pp.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quality standard'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to '''Settings''' ⇾ '''Quality standard'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Score limit and Mistake severities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quality levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are filters that can help you to display the data you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column &lt;br /&gt;
and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 project filters.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, you may find here additional filters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Service''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Report filter'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the project creation date range:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Translator_user_manual&amp;diff=4326</id>
		<title>Translator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Translator_user_manual&amp;diff=4326"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:10:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Project filters */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Introduction'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate a report''' about editor’s corrections;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score with a maximum 100 points;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between a translator and an editor regarding corrections and mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''How to accept invitation'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The translation agency you cooperate with adds your account into the system. You receive an invitation email.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Accept the invitation by clicking the link in the received letter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rr1.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The following window appears:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:42.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose your own username and password, confirm the password, accept the Privacy policy and Terms of service (to read them, click the corresponding links highlighted in blue) and press'''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Your account will be created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''My profile settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''My Profile''' page you can update your personal information and change password.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to the '''My profile''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Translator my profile menu1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Get started with a translator account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are several main menus that you need to focus on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Translator main menus1.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quick comparison''' — here you can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Projects''' — here you can find the list of projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Reports''' — here you can find your reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''System''' — here you can find the Quality standard of the company you cooperate with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quick comparison'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of translated files in the system.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Supported bilingual file types''' to see the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press the &amp;quot;Upload selected files&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quick comparison#Comparison report|comparison report]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; will be created, where you can see the editor’s amendments highlighted with color, and different filters to simplify your work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More details '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quick comparison|here]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Projects menu, you can find the list of projects where you have been assigned as a translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the '''Project ID''' to open a project:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projesdfct ID.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the project was created you can see the time limit details, general information on the project, project manager and their email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:111.png|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:::::::::[[File:222.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the comparison and evaluation reports are generated by an evaluator, you will see:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Comparison details and change percentage details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:5a.png|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluation details and Mistake counts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6a.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:7a.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the evaluator uploaded files, they can start the evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can find the evaluation report by clicking the corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluations report.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Comparison report'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you can see the comparison of the original and amended translation:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparisonse report.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information, please check the &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Comparison report]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project files'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After the evaluator uploaded files, you can find them here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pr iles.png|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reevaluation and arbitration requests'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you receive the email with translation quality evaluation, follow the project ID link in your email:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And do the following actions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. View the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;'''. Look through all the corrections made by the evaluator:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Comparisonf report.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Go to the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation report.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Look through classification of each mistake. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. If you agree with classification of all the mistakes, press &amp;quot;'''Complete project'''&amp;quot;: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The project and its evaluation score are finalized at this stage. If you do not agree with classification of some mistakes, do the following actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Press &amp;quot;'''Add Comment'''&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake that you do not agree with and enter it by clicking &amp;quot;'''Submit'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png| border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
6. When you have entered all the comments, send the project for reevaluation by pressing &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
7. The project will be sent to the evaluator, who will review your comments. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If they are convincing, the evaluator will change the mistake severity in your favor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will receive the reevaluated project. You are able to send this project for reevaluation one more time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. If you have not reached agreement with the evaluator, you can send the project to the arbiter by pressing &amp;quot;'''Request arbitration'''&amp;quot; (it appears instead of &amp;quot;'''Request reevaluation'''&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check your translator reports, go to '''Reports ⇾ Translator report'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New.png|border|410px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find different charts and diagrams:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 13.png|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Monthly average score dynamics:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screesnshot 2.png|border|850px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 11.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Managed by:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Ev4.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Projects by specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pp.png|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by type:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenddshot 7.png|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Mistakes by severity:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screaenshot 8.png|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Quality standard'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To check the quality standard of the company you cooperate with, go to '''Settings''' ⇾ '''Quality standard'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Qq.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can find:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Score limit and Mistake severities:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 m.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake types:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M2.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Mistake type score weight coefficients per specialization:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M3.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Quality levels&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:M4.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are filters that can help you to display the data you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Project filters'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may order projects by particular criteria: click the title of any column &lt;br /&gt;
and all the projects will line up (the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button appears).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 project filters.png|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The column headers which enable this sorting feature are highlighted in blue.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, you may find here additional filters:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 project filter.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Is overdue''' — the system will display the overdue projects only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Stage''' — tick one of the cells, and the system will display only projects at a particular stage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project code''' — the system will display projects with the specified project code. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Translation job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation job ID, entered by the manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Review job code''' — the system will display the projects with a particular review job ID, entered by the manager (differs from translation job code).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project name''' — the system will display the projects with the specified name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specialization''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Service''' — the system will display the projects with a particular translation service.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Evaluation count''' — the system will display projects with the specified evaluation count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Manager''' — the system will display the projects with a particular supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Creation date''' — the system will display the projects with particular creation dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Report filter'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can specify the project creation date range:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Report filters.png|250px]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Reports_and_system_settings&amp;diff=4325</id>
		<title>Reports and system settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Reports_and_system_settings&amp;diff=4325"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:09:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All the data on translation quality assessment are piled up in the system, and after some period you’ll be able to generate reports. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can access reports by pressing '''Reports''' in the upper section of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The level of access to the reports depends on the user role. For more info, please click '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User manuals#Statistics and reports|here]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per translator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per evaluator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per translator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per evaluator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per manager company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Average score per specialization]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''[[System]]''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|180px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Account details]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view and manage your account details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Clients]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the list of your clients and add new clients.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Languages]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the list of your languages and add new languages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Specializations]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the list of default specializations and add a new specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Services]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the services you provide and add new services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Mistake severities]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the list of default mistake severities and add a new mistake severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Mistake types]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — here you may view the list of default mistake types and add a new mistake type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Quality standard]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page, you may view predefined quality standards.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page, you may view and edit the list of default quality levels, or add a new one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Evaluation settings]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page, you may define maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Default time limits]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page you may define the default time limits for translators, evaluators and arbiters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Notifications]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page you may select if a translator should be informed about comparison report creation and decide if a project evaluator should be informed about project completion. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Licensing|License]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; — on this page you can manage your license and view its details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on system settings, please see our video tutorial [[File:Youtube.jpg|40px|link=https://youtu.be/JzZqzXVrmLQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Quick start guide to TQAuditor]] Back to the '''Quick Start Guide''' main page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Users_creation&amp;diff=4324</id>
		<title>Users creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Users_creation&amp;diff=4324"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:08:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user manually, go to &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;  [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create '''Users → New user'''] &amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, enter user info, and click &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to just created user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must confirm registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To import many users at once, go to &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;  [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/import '''Users → Import from Excel'''] &amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, enter user info, and click &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, you’ll need to download the template, fill it with users' data and upload it to the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; There are 4 types of users with different '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[New user#System role|roles in the system]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Translator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Evaluator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Manager'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Administrator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information on users, their system roles etc., please see our '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Users| '''wiki pages''']]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' or view a video tutorial [[File:Youtube.jpg|40px|link=https://youtu.be/3z9sH3p0bzo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Quick start guide to TQAuditor]] Back to the '''Quick Start Guide''' main page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Users_creation&amp;diff=4323</id>
		<title>Users creation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Users_creation&amp;diff=4323"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:08:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You can add users manually, one by one, or import their list from an Excel file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user manually, go to &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;  [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/create '''Users → New user'''] &amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, enter user info, and click &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|190px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The system will send a confirmation e-mail to just created user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user must confirm registration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. To import many users at once, go to &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;  [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/user/import '''Users → Import from Excel'''] &amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, enter user info, and click &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, you’ll need to download the template, fill it with users' data and upload it to the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:note&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; There are 4 types of users with different '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[New user#System role|roles in the system]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Translator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Evaluator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Manager'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Administrator'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information on users, their system roles etc., please see our '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Users| '''wiki pages''']]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' or view a video tutorial [[File:Youtube.jpg|40px|link=https://youtu.be/3z9sH3p0bzo]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Quick start guide to TQAuditor]] Back to the '''Quick Start Guide''' main page&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_score_formula:Details_and_versions&amp;diff=4322</id>
		<title>Quality score formula:Details and versions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Quality_score_formula:Details_and_versions&amp;diff=4322"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:07:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;=='''TQAuditor v3.0'''==&lt;br /&gt;
===How Quality Score is calculated===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In TQAuditor v3.0 the Quality Score formula is similar to MQM score formula http://www.qt21.eu/mqm-definition/definition-2015-12-30.html#scoring-algorithm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The quality score reflects the number of mistakes made per 1000 words of the translated text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The formula is:''' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(GREATEST(account.score_limit - SUM(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) / project.evaluation_total_word_count * 1000, 0), 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''The formula interpretation:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(var1, 2) — returns rounded to two decimal places value &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ROUND(GREATEST(var2, 0), 2) — returns &amp;quot;0&amp;quot; in case of a negative value (example: if &amp;quot;-5&amp;quot; then &amp;quot;0&amp;quot;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Variables interpretation:'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
var1 = GREATEST(main2, 0) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
var2 = account.score_limit - (SUM(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) / project.evaluation_total_word_count) * 1000&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''mistake_severity.score'''—the mistake severity score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''mistake_type_spec.weight'''—the weight coefficient of the mistake type per project specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count'''—total source words after the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#General information|Start evaluation]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' filter is applied (whether with '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#Start evaluation (automatic word count)|automatic]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' or '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report#Start evaluation (manual word count)|manually entered]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' word count).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; Note:&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' '''account.score_limit''' is equal to 100 by default, but you may define the highest score limit you need in the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluation settings]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''TQAuditor v2.14'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How Quality Score is calculated ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quality score reflects the number of mistakes made per 1000 words of translated text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The formula is: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Quality score = Σ(mistake_severity.score * mistake_type_spec.weight) * project.evaluation_corrected_word_count / project.evaluation_sample_word_count / project.evaluation_total_word_count * 1000, &lt;br /&gt;
where:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quality score''' - the number of &amp;quot;base&amp;quot; mistakes per 1000 words (&amp;quot;base&amp;quot; mistake - the mistake that has the severity score of 1 and the weight coefficient of 1).&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Σ''' - the sum of products of the mistake severity score and the weight coefficient of the mistake type per specialization. &lt;br /&gt;
*'''mistake_severity.score''' - the mistake severity score.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''mistake_type_spec.weight''' - the weight coefficient of the mistake type per project specialization.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_corrected_word_count''' - source words in corrected units in the evaluation sample.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_sample_word_count''' - total source words in the evaluation sample.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count''' - total source words after evaluation start filter is applied.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How the number of translated words is selected ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To make it simpler, let’s make an example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before starting the evaluation, the reviewer selects the number of words to evaluate:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation filter.jpg|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now imagine that the whole translated text (marketing specialization) contains 3126 words, and the editor corrects the segments containing 2323 source words. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You select 1000 words sample which is randomly taken by the system out of 2323 source words in corrected units and add 5 mistakes of different types and severities. Two of them are minor punctuation mistakes &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(the severity score of 1 and the weight coefficient of 0.9 for every mistake), and three of them are major grammar mistakes (the severity score of 5 and the weight coefficient of 1.2 for every mistake):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QS types and severities 1.jpg|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' By default, the system has pre-defined quality standards, but you can define your own corporate '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[System|quality standards]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a result, we get:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Quality score''' = Σ(1*0.9+1*0.9+5*1,2+5*1,2+5*1,2)*2323/3126/1001*1000=14,699&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll be able to see these numbers on the evaluation page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QSF result 1.jpg|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Where:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quality score''' = 14,7.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_corrected_word_count''' = 2323.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_sample_word_count''' = 3126.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''project.evaluation_total_word_count''' = 1001.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Why is it made that way? ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We came to this through several stages of evolution. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, the system was selecting just the beginning of the text, and we found out that the translators started to translate first 1000 words better than the rest of the text. So we decided to select the random part of the text. But then the system sometimes selected the pieces containing no corrections while skipping heavily corrected parts. So we changed the logic, and now the system returns the required number of corrections to the evaluator, but remembers how much text it took to find these corrections.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluation_settings&amp;diff=4321</id>
		<title>Evaluation settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluation_settings&amp;diff=4321"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:05:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''Evaluation settings page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/evaluation-settings cloud.tqauditor.com/system/evaluation-settings]''&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Evaluation settings&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Evaluation settings menu new.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may specify the score limit, maximum number of evaluation attempts, and default evaluation sample word count limit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation settings.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Score limit&amp;quot; — the highest number of points a translation quality evaluation can have (by default the score limit is set to 100)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Maximum evaluation attempts&amp;quot; — the number of times the evaluation can be done. &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If this value is bigger than 1, the translator will be able to request the reevaluation. For example, if &amp;quot;Maximum evaluation attempts&amp;quot; is set to 2, the translator can request the reevaluation once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Default evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — the suggested default number of words for evaluation with an automatic word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluation_settings&amp;diff=4320</id>
		<title>Evaluation settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Evaluation_settings&amp;diff=4320"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:05:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''Evaluation settings page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/system/evaluation-settings cloud.tqauditor.com/system/evaluation-settings]''&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; -&amp;gt; &amp;quot;Evaluation settings&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Evaluation settings menu new.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may specify the score limit, maximum number of evaluation attempts, and default evaluation sample word count limit:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Evaluation settings.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Score limit&amp;quot; — the highest number of points a translation quality evaluation can have (by default the score limit is set to 100)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Maximum evaluation attempts&amp;quot; — the number of times the evaluation can be done. &lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; If this value is bigger than 1, the translator will be able to request the reevaluation. For example, if &amp;quot;Maximum evaluation attempts&amp;quot; is set to 2, the translator can request the reevaluation once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Default evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — the suggested default number of words for evaluation with an automatic word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Edit_quality_levels&amp;diff=4319</id>
		<title>Edit quality levels</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Edit_quality_levels&amp;diff=4319"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T13:05:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;''Edit quality levels page: [https://cloud.tqauditor.com/mark/edit cloud.tqauditor.com/mark/edit]''&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; → &amp;quot;Edit quality levels&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Edit QL menu.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can edit, remove, or add new quality levels. By default, there are two quality levels, but you can add as many levels as needed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit quality levels2.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Add below&amp;quot; to add a new quality level:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit quality levels3.1.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the quality level is added, fill in the name, change the &amp;quot;Score to (&amp;lt;)&amp;quot; value, and click &amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Edit quality levels4.1.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You cannot remove the quality levels in use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=System]] Back to the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; page.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Project_details&amp;diff=4318</id>
		<title>Project details</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Project_details&amp;diff=4318"/>
				<updated>2022-07-12T12:19:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Manager can control the project - download project files, reassign participants ('''manager, translator, evaluator''' or '''arbiter''') or delete this project at all. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''':&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Evaluator (not manager) uploads the files. Manager (if he has not assigned himself as project evaluator) may only download them if needed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Project details are divided into several blocks:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Project details'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project detjails.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Project participants'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project participants.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project manager''' - the supervisor of the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project manager email''' - email of the project supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project translator''' - user, that performs translation.&lt;br /&gt;
	&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project evaluator''' - user, that estimates translator’s work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Project arbiter''' - user, that makes a final decision in dispute situations between translator and evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Comparison details'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Project Comparison details section.jpg|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Total units''' - the total number of segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Corrected units''' - the number of segments with amendments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Total source words''' - the total number of words in the source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Source words in corrected units''' - the number of source words in amended segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Change percentage details'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Project Change percentage details section.jpg|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Characters in translated files''' - the number of symbols in translated files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Characters in same part of text''' - the number of symbols in the same part of the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Change percentage''' - the share of changed part.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Evaluation details'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Project Evaluation details section level.jpg|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Evaluation count''' - the number of times translation was sent on reevaluation/arbitration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Skip locked units''' - hidden, &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units (for example, the client wants some parts, extremely important for him, stayed unchanged. Besides, extra units slow down editor’s work).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Skip segments with match &amp;gt;=''' - predefined fuzzy match percentage (the program hides segments with match greater than or equal to, that you specified).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Total units''' - the total number of text segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Corrected units''' - the number of segments with amendments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Total source words''' - the total number of words in the source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Source words in corrected units''' - the number of source words in amended segments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quality score''' - the complex index of performing translation that depends on the total quantity of words, specialization, the severity of mistakes, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Quality level''' - evaluation of the translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Mistakes summary'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:Project Mistakes summary section.jpg|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may find the mistakes classified by gravity ('''Non-scoring, Minor, Major, Critical''') &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and type ('''Accuracy, Grammar, Miscellaneous, Punctuation, Spelling, Style, Terminology''').&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=Projects]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4317</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4317"/>
				<updated>2022-05-24T14:14:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Register an account */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to create projects and manage project participants, enable discussion between the translator and editor, get the quality score of translations, add users to your company account, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4316</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4316"/>
				<updated>2022-05-24T09:37:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* System settings */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4315</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4315"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:41:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator company reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator company report. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4314</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4314"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:31:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4313</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4313"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:31:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]. On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4312</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4312"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:30:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4311</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4311"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:30:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4310</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4310"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:28:50Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4309</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4309"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:28:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports. Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4308</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4308"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:22:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports. On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4307</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4307"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:21:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports. On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4306</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4306"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:21:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator company. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator company report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4305</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4305"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:09:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4304</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4304"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:09:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4303</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4303"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:08:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4302</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4302"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:08:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* The list of all available reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Evaluator reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4301</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4301"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:06:29Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4300</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4300"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T13:05:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''The list of all available reports'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Translator reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4299</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4299"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T12:57:14Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Translator's review */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4298</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4298"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T12:57:02Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Translator's review */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[evaluation report| Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4297</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4297"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T12:51:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator company|per translator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager company|per manager company]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4296</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4296"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T12:32:49Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per translator company|per translator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per manager company|per manager company]], per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every translator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you will find information about every evaluator. For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4295</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4295"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T12:01:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the &amp;quot;manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per translator company|per translator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per manager company|per manager company]], per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per translator|Per translator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per evaluator|Per evaluator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per manager|Per manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per translator company|Per translator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per evaluator company|Per evaluator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per manager company|Per manager company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per specialization|Per specialization]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;On this page, you will find information about every translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4294</id>
		<title>Administrator user manual</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.tqauditor.com/index.php?title=Administrator_user_manual&amp;diff=4294"/>
				<updated>2022-05-16T11:47:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Andrii: /* Reports */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''For a brief overview of the system, please check this video:'''   [[File:YT.png|40px|link=https://youtu.be/r7dWpiHU9AI]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''About TQAuditor'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
TQAuditor 3.04 is the system that '''evaluates and monitors translation quality''' and allows you to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''compare''' unedited translation made by a translator with edited version received from an editor;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''generate''' a [[Comparison report|comparison report]];&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''classify''' each correction by mistake type and severity, thus allowing to get the translation quality evaluation score;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*ensure '''anonymous communication''' between the translator, evaluator and arbiter regarding mistakes classification;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''automate a process''' of maintaining the evaluation project;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''save''' all evaluated translations '''in the database''' and create translation quality reports both on each individual user and the whole company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*you can '''create the list of top translators''' with the highest score, '''see dynamics of quality''' per individual translator by month, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[Quick comparison]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can compare two versions of the translation without registering an account.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;background-color:yellow&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com https://tqauditor.com]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and click '''&amp;quot;Compare files&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tq.png|border|570px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It will open the '''Quick comparison''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Choose the translated and reviewed files, and click the '''&amp;quot;Update selected files&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Compare.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; TQAuditor accepts bilingual files of different formats (Helium, XLF, XLZ, SDLXliff, TTX, TMX etc.). Click &amp;quot;[[Quick_comparison#Upload_files|Supported bilingual file types]]&amp;quot; on the &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot; page to see all the file formats TQA work with.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. The '''Comparison report''' page will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Big page.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quick comparison details'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can delete the comparison report by clicking a corresponding button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 delete comparison.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also upload files for a new comparison report by clicking &amp;quot;Upload files&amp;quot;. An existing comparison report will be deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 upload files.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Markup display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Markup display settings allow you to choose how tags will be displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Full&amp;quot; — tags have original length, so you can see data within:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 full.png|border|140px]] [[File:1.png|border|650px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Short&amp;quot; — the contents of the tags are not displayed and you see only their position in the text:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 short.png|border|140px]] [[File:2.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;None&amp;quot; — tags are not displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3 none.png|border|140px]] [[File:3.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Units display'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; — units with and without corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 all.png|border|150px]] [[File:1 all text .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;With corrections&amp;quot; — only units with corrections are displayed:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 with corrections.png|border|150px]] [[File:2. not all .png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Register an account'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You’ll need to register an account to benefit from the full functionality of the system, e.g. comparing many file pairs at once, classify mistakes, get the quality score of the translation, enable discussion between the translator and editor, and see the detailed reports of everything that happens with translation quality in your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; To use the full functionality of the system, you have to register an account. It will allow you to add users to your company account, create projects and manage project participants, generate detailed reports, and set up the quality standard for your company.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to [https://tqauditor.com tqauditor.com] and click &amp;quot;Sign up&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sign up.png|border|550px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in the information, read Terms of Service and Privacy Policy, mark the checkbox, and click the &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 2.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Add users'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can add users manually or import a users list from an Excel file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Add users manually'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. To add a new user, go to '''Users → New user''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add users.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Fill in all the fields and click the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Eva apple.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt; '''Note''': &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only users with the marked '''&amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot;''' checkbox can get the invitation email and complete registration, use the system and get email notifications. If the &amp;quot;Can log in&amp;quot; checkbox is unmarked, the invitation email will not be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You may also edit '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[User details page|user details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' by clicking the user's ID:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screenshot 23.png|border|900px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 roles in the system: translator, evaluator, manager, and administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Import users from Excel'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have the list of users with their contact info, you can easily import it without the need to enter such information manually.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Users → Import from Excel''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Import from excel.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed instructions on users import, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Import users from Excel]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only an account owner can import users from Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all users are added, you can start creating projects and managing project participants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''[[New project|Create project]]'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to '''Projects → New project''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Projects.png|border|130px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Enter the required information and press the &amp;quot;'''Create'''&amp;quot; button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create new project.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. To check the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Project details|project details]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''', select the ID number:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Prdoject ID.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manager can edit project details, download files, reassign project participants, clone or delete the project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Project details.png|border|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; only the evaluator can upload files. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Create comparison report'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After getting an email notification from the system the assigned evaluator has to compare the original and reviewed versions of a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. The evaluator uploads files:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 ev upload files.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. When done, the evaluator can create the comparison report:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Create comparison reevport.png|border|230px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Then the evaluator can start the evaluation whether with an automatic or manual word count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (automatic word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you select this option, the system will display randomly selected segments containing only corrected units for evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click '''Start evaluation (automatic word count)''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 automaic.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluation settings can be configured:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip repetitions&amp;quot; — the system will hide repeated segments (only one of them will be displayed)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip locked units&amp;quot; — the &amp;quot;frozen&amp;quot; units will not be displayed (for example, this setting is used if a client wants some important parts of the translated text to stay unchanged).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Skip units with match &amp;gt;=&amp;quot; — units with matches greater than or equal to a specified number will not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&amp;quot;Evaluation sample word count limit&amp;quot; — this value is used to adjust how many segments for evaluation will be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;'''Start evaluation'''&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Start evaluation automatic world count.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Start evaluation (manual word count)'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the word count given by the system does not correspond to the word count you want, you may manually enter the total word count before starting evaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this option is applied, all the corrected units will be displayed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Start evaluation (manual word count):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2 manual.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the number of evaluated source words:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. start evaluation.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this step, the project evaluator has to select the sample for the quality assessment and classify every correction by type and severity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click the '''&amp;quot;Add mistake&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1. 91.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the information about the mistake and click '''&amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:2. mistake.png|border|280px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The evaluator can add mistakes, edit existing mistakes and comments or delete them by clicking the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:3. mistal.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the mistakes classification is done, the evaluator has to click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. Then, the translator will get a notification of evaluation completion and a quality assessment report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that any project participant can export the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Complete evaluation'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When all the mistakes are added and classified, click &amp;quot;Complete evaluation&amp;quot;, write an evaluation summary, and click the &amp;quot;Complete&amp;quot; button. The translator will receive an email notification of quality evaluation completion and will be able to review the evaluation report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 complete evaluation.png|border|530px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Translator's review'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator receives the email notification of '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Comparison report| сomparison report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' creation, they can review all the corrections made by the reviewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the '''&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;[[Evaluation report| Evaluation report]]&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;''' is created, the translator can review the mistakes classification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator agrees with the mistakes classification, they click &amp;quot;Complete project&amp;quot;. The project and its evaluation score will be finalized at this stage:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Complete tr.png|border|200px]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator does not agree with the mistakes classification, they can ask the evaluator to decrease a mistake severity. To do so, they click &amp;quot;Add comment&amp;quot; in the box of the mistake, write a comment clarifying the matter and click &amp;quot;Submit&amp;quot;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Misatake comment.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the translator enters all the comments, they request the reevaluation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Request reevaluation.png|border|200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; The ability to request the reevaluation (and how many times) depends on the account [[Evaluation settings|evaluation settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the translator still does not agree, they can request arbitration (the corresponding button appears instead of &amp;quot;Request reevaluation&amp;quot;):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Arb.png|border|220px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The arbiter will provide a final score that cannot be disputed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Projects filters'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use filters on the &amp;quot;'''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Projects list#Additional filters|Projects list]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 f.png|border|170px]] [[File:2 fil.png|border|170px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To sort the projects by the needed criteria, please click any column name highlighted in blue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the projects are sorted, you will see the arrow [[file:Line up arrow.jpg|border|25px]] button next to the corresponding column name:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1.2 project list.png|border|1000px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''Reports'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate various reports. Click the '''Reports''' menu on the top panel&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reports.png|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the '''Translator''' role can access only their individual reports on their translations quality:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Users with the &amp;quot;translator&amp;quot; role can access only their individual translation quality reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the '''Evaluator''' role can access their individual reports on their translations quality and their evaluations reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Users with the &amp;quot;evaluator&amp;quot; role can access their individual translation quality reports and evaluator reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the '''Manager''' and '''Administrator''' roles can access all the available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Users with the &amp;quot;Manager&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Administrator&amp;quot; roles can access both their individual reports and other translators' and evaluators' reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list of all available reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Average score reports:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the average reports: per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per translator|translator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per translator company|per translator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per evaluator|evaluator]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per evaluator company|per evaluator company]], &lt;br /&gt;
per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per manager|manager]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' and [[Average score per manager company|per manager company]], per '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Average score per specialization|specialization]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per translator|Per translator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per evaluator|Per evaluator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per manager|Per manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per translator company|Per translator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per evaluator company|Per evaluator company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per manager company|Per manager company]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Average score per specialization|Per specialization]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator report|Translator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;On this page, you will find information about every translator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Translator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator report|Evaluator reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;s&amp;gt;On this page, you will find information about every evaluator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Evaluator report]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&amp;lt;/s&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Translator company report|Translator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Evaluator company report|Evaluator company reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=='''System settings'''==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can change and set system values in the '''System''' menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:orange&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''[new version]'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can adjust account settings and specify system values in the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; menu:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:System settings.png|border|150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of these menu screens is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Account details]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Account details page you can change the company name or delete the account by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Account details.png|border|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Clients]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Client menu contains two submenus. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Clients.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Clients list''' — the list of your client where you can edit or delete them by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cliednt list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a client connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded client by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New client''' — here you can add a new client by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New client.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Languages]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The languages' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Languages1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Languages list''' — here you may view, edit or delete your language pairs by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Langduages list.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete a language connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded language by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New language''' — here you can add a new language pair by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Add&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add new language '.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Specializations]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Specialization is a particular field that translation is focused on (an object of translation).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 spesial.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Specializations list''' — here you may view, edit, and delete your specializations by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1 specializationfs.png|border|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete specializations connected with projects. Just select  the unneeded specialization by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New specialization''' — here you may add a new specialization by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New specializations.png|border|270px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Services]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The services' menu contains two submenus:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Services list''' — here you can view, edit or delete services you provide by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Services list.png|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New service''' — here you can add new services by pressing the '''Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New service.png|border|160px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake severities]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake severity is the gravity of mistake.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to '''System → Mistake severities''':&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistake severties.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake severities list''' - here you may [[Mistake severities|view, edit, and delete the mistake severities]] by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistakse severities list.jpg|border|480px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:''' &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You can’t delete mistake severities connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake severity by pressing &amp;quot;'''Edit'''&amp;quot; and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake severity''' - here you may add a new mistake severity by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake severties.png|border|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''[[Mistake types]]'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mistake type is the kind of mistake. For example, Grammar, Punctuation, etc:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mstake types.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This menu screen contains two submenus. Each of them is described below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Mistake types list''' - here you may view, edit, and delete the mistake types by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mistcake types list.jpg|border|450px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t delete mistake types connected with projects. Just select the unneeded mistake by pressing '''&amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot;''' and uncheck the &amp;quot;'''Enabled'''&amp;quot; box. It will not appear in the drop-down list anymore.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''New mistake type''' - here you may add a new mistake type by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Create&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New mistake typ2e.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Quality standards'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, the system has predefined quality standards, i.e. types of mistakes, penalty scores etc., but you can change them to define your own corporate quality standards. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more detailed information, please see the '''&amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[[Quality standard]]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;''' page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Edit quality levels'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you may see the list of default &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;'''[[Edit quality levels|quality levels]]'''&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt; proposed by the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can update, remove, and add new quality levels by pressing the corresponding buttons:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:1quality.png|border|800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:red&amp;quot;&amp;gt;'''Note:'''&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; You can’t remove quality levels connected with projects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Evaluation settings'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the '''Evaluation settings''' page you may define score limit, maximum evaluation attempts and default evaluation sample word count limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Screeenshot 1.png|border|300px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Score limit''' — the maximum score your translations can get.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Maximum evaluation attempts''' — here you may define, how many times translator may argue in discussion with evaluator. By default, translator may leave 3 comments. 2 times replies evaluator, but on the 3-rd time, arbiter replies and complete this discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*'''Default evaluation sample word count limit''' — here you may define the number of words for evaluation (the system offers 1000 words by default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Default time limits'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page you may define evaluator/ translator/ arbiter time limit by pressing the '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' button:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Default time limit.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''Notifications'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can configure whether the system should send notifications of comparison reports creation to translators, and of projects completion to evaluators:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Email notifications.png|border|350px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enable or disable the corresponding notification, and press '''&amp;quot;Update&amp;quot;''' to save changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==='''License'''===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this page, you may see your license details:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:License page.jpg|border|700px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By pressing &amp;quot;'''Manage license'''&amp;quot; you can manage your license.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'''If any questions arise, please &amp;lt;U&amp;gt;[https://tqauditor.com/contacts.html  contact us]&amp;lt;/U&amp;gt;'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Good luck!'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Redirect.jpg|40px|link=User manual]] Back to the '''table of contents'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Andrii</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>